Updated Indonesian translation.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 783Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 784@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
785
786@kindex -N
787@kindex --omagic
788@cindex read/write from cmd line
789@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 790@item -N
252b5132
RH
791@itemx --omagic
792Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
793not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
794libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
795mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
796is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
797specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
798
799@kindex --no-omagic
800@cindex OMAGIC
801@item --no-omagic
802This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
803sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
804be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
805shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
806
807@kindex -o @var{output}
808@kindex --output=@var{output}
809@cindex naming the output file
810@item -o @var{output}
811@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 812Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
813option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
814script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
815
816@kindex -O @var{level}
817@cindex generating optimized output
818@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 819If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 820the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
821should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
822option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
823the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
824no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
825of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 826
a712da20
NC
827@kindex -q
828@kindex --emit-relocs
829@cindex retain relocations in final executable
830@item -q
831@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 832Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
833Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
834order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
835in larger executables.
836
dbab7a7b
NC
837This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
838
4f471f39
RS
839@kindex --force-dynamic
840@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
841@item --force-dynamic
842Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
843to VxWorks targets.
844
252b5132
RH
845@cindex partial link
846@cindex relocatable output
847@kindex -r
1049f94e 848@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 849@item -r
1049f94e 850@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 851Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 852turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
853linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
854magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
855@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 856@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
857If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
858linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
859constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
860
62bf86b4
HPN
861When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
862partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
863relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
864example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
865with input files in other formats at all.
866
252b5132
RH
867This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
868
869@kindex -R @var{file}
870@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
871@cindex symbol-only input
872@item -R @var{filename}
873@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
874Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
875relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
876to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
877programs. You may use this option more than once.
878
ff5dcc92 879For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 880followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 881the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
882
883@kindex -s
884@kindex --strip-all
885@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 886@item -s
252b5132
RH
887@itemx --strip-all
888Omit all symbol information from the output file.
889
890@kindex -S
891@kindex --strip-debug
892@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 893@item -S
252b5132
RH
894@itemx --strip-debug
895Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
896
897@kindex -t
898@kindex --trace
899@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 900@item -t
252b5132 901@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 902Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
903
904@kindex -T @var{script}
905@kindex --script=@var{script}
906@cindex script files
907@item -T @var{scriptfile}
908@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
909Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 910@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 911@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
912output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
913the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
914specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
915options accumulate.
252b5132 916
14be8564
L
917@kindex -dT @var{script}
918@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
919@cindex script files
920@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
921@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
922Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
923
924This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
925processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
926command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
927@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
928behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
929command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
930the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
931@samp{gcc}).
932
252b5132
RH
933@kindex -u @var{symbol}
934@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
935@cindex undefined symbol
936@item -u @var{symbol}
937@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
938Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
939symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
940modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
941different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
942option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
943
944@kindex -Ur
945@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 946@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
947For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
948@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 949turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
950@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
951It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
952with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
953be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
954@samp{-r} for the others.
955
577a0623
AM
956@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
957@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
959@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
960missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
961specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
962multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
963input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
964in a linker script.
a854a4a7 965
252b5132
RH
966@kindex -v
967@kindex -V
968@kindex --version
969@cindex version
970@item -v
971@itemx --version
972@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 973Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
974lists the supported emulations.
975
976@kindex -x
977@kindex --discard-all
978@cindex deleting local symbols
979@item -x
980@itemx --discard-all
981Delete all local symbols.
982
983@kindex -X
984@kindex --discard-locals
985@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 986@item -X
252b5132 987@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
988Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
989system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
990or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
991
992@kindex -y @var{symbol}
993@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994@cindex symbol tracing
995@item -y @var{symbol}
996@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
998option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
999to prepend an underscore.
1000
1001This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1002don't know where the reference is coming from.
1003
1004@kindex -Y @var{path}
1005@item -Y @var{path}
1006Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1007for Solaris compatibility.
1008
1009@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1010@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1011The recognized keywords are:
1012@table @samp
1013
1014@item combreloc
1015Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1016lookup caching possible.
1017
1018@item defs
560e09e9 1019Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1020shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1021
6aa29e7b
JJ
1022@item execstack
1023Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1024
cd6d6c15
NC
1025@item initfirst
1026This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1027It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1028before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1029the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1030the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1031objects.
1032
1033@item interpose
1034Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1035but the primary executable.
1036
5fa222e4
AM
1037@item lazy
1038When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1039dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1040the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1041Lazy binding is the default.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item loadfltr
1044Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1045runtime.
1046
1047@item muldefs
1048Allows multiple definitions.
1049
1050@item nocombreloc
1051Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1052
1053@item nocopyreloc
1054Disables production of copy relocs.
1055
1056@item nodefaultlib
1057Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1058ignore any default library search paths.
1059
1060@item nodelete
1061Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1062
1063@item nodlopen
1064Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1065
1066@item nodump
1067Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1068
6aa29e7b
JJ
1069@item noexecstack
1070Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1071
1072@item norelro
1073Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1074
cd6d6c15
NC
1075@item now
1076When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1077dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1078when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1079deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1080first called.
1081
1082@item origin
1083Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1084
6aa29e7b
JJ
1085@item relro
1086Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1087
24718e3b
L
1088@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1089Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1090
1091@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1092Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1093
cd6d6c15
NC
1094@end table
1095
ece2d90e 1096Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1097
1098@kindex -(
1099@cindex groups of archives
1100@item -( @var{archives} -)
1101@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1102The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1103either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1104
1105The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1106references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1107the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1108archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1109object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1110would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1111they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1112resolved.
1113
1114Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1115it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1116more archives.
1117
69da35b5
NC
1118@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1119@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1123recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1124and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1125the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1126behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1127so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1128restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1129
4a43e768
AM
1130@kindex --as-needed
1131@kindex --no-as-needed
1132@item --as-needed
1133@itemx --no-as-needed
1134This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1135on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1136the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1137on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1138needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1139emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1140from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1141DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1142undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1143@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1144
e56f61be
L
1145@kindex --add-needed
1146@kindex --no-add-needed
1147@item --add-needed
1148@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1149These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1150their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1151options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1152and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1153
252b5132
RH
1154@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1155@item -assert @var{keyword}
1156This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1157
1158@kindex -Bdynamic
1159@kindex -dy
1160@kindex -call_shared
1161@item -Bdynamic
1162@itemx -dy
1163@itemx -call_shared
1164Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1165for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1166default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1167for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1168multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1169@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1170
a1ab1d2a
UD
1171@kindex -Bgroup
1172@item -Bgroup
1173Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1174section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1175object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1176@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1177only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1178
252b5132
RH
1179@kindex -Bstatic
1180@kindex -dn
1181@kindex -non_shared
1182@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1183@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1184@itemx -dn
1185@itemx -non_shared
1186@itemx -static
1187Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1188platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1189variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1190may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1191library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1192option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1193option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1194shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1195references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1196libraries.
252b5132
RH
1197
1198@kindex -Bsymbolic
1199@item -Bsymbolic
1200When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1201definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1202for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1203within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1204platforms which support shared libraries.
1205
40b36307
L
1206@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1207@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1208When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1209symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1210This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1211libraries.
1212
55255dae
L
1213@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1214@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1216typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1217global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1218within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1219to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1220in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1221which support shared libraries.
1222
1223The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1224scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1225
40b36307
L
1226@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1227@item --dynamic-list-data
1228Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1229
1230@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1231@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1233is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1234
0b8a70d9
L
1235@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1236@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1238
252b5132
RH
1239@kindex --check-sections
1240@kindex --no-check-sections
1241@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1242@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1243Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1244been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1245perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1246suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1247allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1248restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1249Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1250force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1251option.
252b5132 1252
ddbb8a31
NC
1253@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1254@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1258by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1259command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1260output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1261input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1262specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1263follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1264behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1265
1266This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1267libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1268the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1269DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1270required by the output binary. With
1271@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1272of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1273library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1274symbols.
1275
252b5132
RH
1276@cindex cross reference table
1277@kindex --cref
1278@item --cref
1279Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1280generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1281Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1282
1283The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1284easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1285sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1286symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1287definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1288
4818e05f
AM
1289@cindex common allocation
1290@kindex --no-define-common
1291@item --no-define-common
1292This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1293The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1294@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1295
1296The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1297the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1298of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1299forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1300Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1301from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1302This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1303and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1304duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1305paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1306
252b5132 1307@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1308@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1309@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1310Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1311address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1312times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1313limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1314context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1315symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1316constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1317using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1318Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1319space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1320@var{expression}.
1321
1322@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1323@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1324@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1325@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1326@itemx --no-demangle
1327These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1328and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1329present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1330underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1331mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1332different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1333to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1334demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1335is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1336
1337@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1338@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1339@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1340@item -I@var{file}
1341@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1342Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1343generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1344linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1345doing.
1346
7ce691ae 1347@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1348@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1349@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1350@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1351Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1352with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1353
252b5132
RH
1354@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1355@item --force-exe-suffix
1356Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1357
1358If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1359@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1360the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1361option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1362Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1363it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1364
1365@kindex --gc-sections
1366@kindex --no-gc-sections
1367@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1368@item --gc-sections
1369@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1370Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1371targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1372performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1373@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1374
d5465ba2
AM
1375@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1376examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1377symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1378command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1379referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1380libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1381referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1382the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1383relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1384
ac69cbc6
TG
1385This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1386@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1387specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1388a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1389
c17d87de
NC
1390@kindex --print-gc-sections
1391@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1392@cindex garbage collection
1393@item --print-gc-sections
1394@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1395List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1396printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1397collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1398default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1399be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1400line.
1401
252b5132
RH
1402@cindex help
1403@cindex usage
1404@kindex --help
1405@item --help
1406Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1407
ea20a7da
CC
1408@kindex --target-help
1409@item --target-help
1410Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1411
2509a395
SL
1412@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1413@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1414Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1415@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1416
1417@cindex memory usage
1418@kindex --no-keep-memory
1419@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1420@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1421symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1422instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1423necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1424while linking a large executable.
1425
1426@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1427@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1428@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1430Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1431is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1432The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1433behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1434libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1435
aa713662
L
1436@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1437@kindex -z muldefs
1438@item --allow-multiple-definition
1439@itemx -z muldefs
1440Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1441report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1442first definition will be used.
1443
b79e8c78 1444@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1445@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1446@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1448Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1449This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1450determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1451shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1452how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1453
903249d7
NC
1454The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1455referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1456an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1457a shared library.
1458
1459The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1460libraries specified at link time are that:
1461
1462@itemize @bullet
1463@item
1464A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1465that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1466resolvable at load time.
1467@item
1468There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1469symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1470
1471The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1472select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1473architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1474appropriate memset function.
1475@end itemize
b79e8c78 1476
31941635
L
1477@kindex --no-undefined-version
1478@item --no-undefined-version
1479Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1480it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1481will be issued instead.
1482
3e3b46e5
PB
1483@kindex --default-symver
1484@item --default-symver
1485Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1486exported symbols.
1487
1488@kindex --default-imported-symver
1489@item --default-imported-symver
1490Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1491imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1492
252b5132
RH
1493@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1494@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1495Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1496files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1497been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1498This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1499errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1500have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1501inappropriate.
1502
fe7929ce
AM
1503@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1504@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1506library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1507
252b5132
RH
1508@kindex --no-whole-archive
1509@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1510Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1511archive files.
1512
1513@cindex output file after errors
1514@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1515@item --noinhibit-exec
1516Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1517Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1518errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1519when it issues any error whatsoever.
1520
0a9c1c8e
CD
1521@kindex -nostdlib
1522@item -nostdlib
1523Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1524command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1525(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1526
252b5132 1527@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1528@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1529@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1530@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1531file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1532@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1533object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1534object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1535should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1536usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1537name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1538list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1539command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1540this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1541@end ifclear
1542
36af4a4e
JJ
1543@kindex -pie
1544@kindex --pic-executable
1545@item -pie
1546@itemx --pic-executable
1547@cindex position independent executables
1548Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1549ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1550libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1551address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1552normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1553defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1554
252b5132
RH
1555@kindex -qmagic
1556@item -qmagic
1557This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1558
1559@kindex -Qy
1560@item -Qy
1561This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1562
1563@kindex --relax
1564@cindex synthesizing linker
1565@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1566@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1567An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1568@ifset GENERIC
1569This option is only supported on a few targets.
1570@end ifset
1571@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1572@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1576@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1577@ifset XTENSA
1578@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1579@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1580@ifset M68HC11
1581@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1582@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1583@ifset POWERPC
1584@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1585@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1586
1587On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1588optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1589in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1590instructions in the output object file.
1591
1592On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1593debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1594@ifset GENERIC
1595This is known to be
1596the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1597@end ifset
1598
1599@ifset GENERIC
1600On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1601but ignored.
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@cindex retaining specified symbols
1605@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1606@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1607@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1608@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1609Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1610discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1611symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1612@ifset GENERIC
1613(such as VxWorks)
1614@end ifset
1615where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1616run-time memory.
1617
1618@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1619or symbols needed for relocations.
1620
1621You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1622line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1623
1624@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1625@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1626@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1627@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1628Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1629linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1630arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1631them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1632also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1633objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1634@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1635ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1636@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1637
ff5dcc92 1638The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1639SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1640@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1641runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1642options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1643gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1644file systems.
252b5132 1645
ff5dcc92 1646For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1647followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1648the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1649@end ifset
1650
1651@ifset GENERIC
1652@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1653@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1654@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1655When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1656happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1657of the input files.
1658
1659When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1660non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1661shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1662explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1663specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1664@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1665either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1666appearing multiple times.
1667
28c309a2
NC
1668This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1669that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1670is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1671runtime linker would do.
1672
252b5132 1673The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1674libraries:
252b5132
RH
1675@enumerate
1676@item
ff5dcc92 1677Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1678@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1679Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1680between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1681specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1682used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1683at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1684by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1685the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1686@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1687On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1688@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1689environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1690@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1691On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1692directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1695variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1696@item
ec4eb78a
L
1697For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1698@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1699libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1700@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1701@item
252b5132
RH
1702The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1703@item
1704For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1705exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1706@end enumerate
1707
1708If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1709warning and continue with the link.
1710@end ifset
1711
1712@kindex -shared
1713@kindex -Bshareable
1714@item -shared
1715@itemx -Bshareable
1716@cindex shared libraries
1717Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1718and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1719shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1720undefined symbols in the link.
1721
252b5132 1722@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1723@item --sort-common
1724@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1725@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1726This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1727ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1728sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1729eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1730between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1731specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1732
2509a395
SL
1733@kindex --sort-section=name
1734@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1735This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1736patterns in the linker script.
1737
2509a395
SL
1738@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1739@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1740This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1741patterns in the linker script.
1742
252b5132 1743@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1744@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1745Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1746each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1747size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1748
1749@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1750@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1751Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1752output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1753This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1754certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1755cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1756that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1757support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1758input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1759more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1760many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1761
1762@kindex --stats
1763@item --stats
1764Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1765as execution time and memory usage.
1766
2509a395 1767@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1768@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1769Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1770configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1771that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1772
252b5132
RH
1773@kindex --traditional-format
1774@cindex traditional format
1775@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1776For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1777the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1778use the traditional format instead.
1779
1780@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1781For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1782symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1783full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1784@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1785trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1786combine duplicate entries.
1787
2509a395
SL
1788@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1789@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1790Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1791address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1792times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1793line.
1794@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1795for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1796@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1797should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1798sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1799
2509a395
SL
1800@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1801@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1802@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1803@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1804@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1805@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1806@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1807Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1808@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1809
2509a395
SL
1810@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1811@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1812@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1813When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1814of the first byte of the text segment.
1815
560e09e9
NC
1816@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1817@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1818Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1819values for @samp{method}:
1820
1821@table @samp
1822@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1823Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1824
1825@item report-all
da8bce14 1826Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1827
1828@item ignore-in-object-files
1829Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1830ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1831
1832@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1833Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1834ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1835when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1836libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1837command line.
1838@end table
1839
1840The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1841by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1842
1843Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1844unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1845can change this to a warning.
1846
252b5132
RH
1847@kindex --verbose
1848@cindex verbose
1849@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1850@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1851Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1852supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1853the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1854
1855@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1856@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1857@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1858Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1859used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1860about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1861is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1862see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1863use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1864symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1865@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1866
7ce691ae 1867@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1868@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1869@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1870@item --warn-common
1871Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1872a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1873but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1874you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1875Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1876warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1877
1878There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1879
1880@table @samp
1881@item int i = 1;
1882A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1883file.
1884
1885@item extern int i;
1886An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1887There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1888variable somewhere.
1889
1890@item int i;
1891A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1892variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1893The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1894single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1895size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1896a definition of the same variable.
1897@end table
1898
1899The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1900Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1901just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1902encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1903a common symbol.
1904
1905@enumerate
1906@item
1907Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1908definition for the symbol.
1909@smallexample
1910@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1911 overridden by definition
1912@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1913@end smallexample
1914
1915@item
1916Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1917the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1918except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1919@smallexample
1920@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1921 overriding common
1922@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1923@end smallexample
1924
1925@item
1926Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1927@smallexample
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1929 of `@var{symbol}'
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1931@end smallexample
1932
1933@item
1934Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1937 overridden by larger common
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1943the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1944encountered in a different order.
1945@smallexample
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1947 overriding smaller common
1948@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1949@end smallexample
1950@end enumerate
1951
1952@kindex --warn-constructors
1953@item --warn-constructors
1954Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1955object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1956detect the use of global constructors.
1957
1958@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1959@item --warn-multiple-gp
1960Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1961This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1962Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1963section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1964of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1965base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1966base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1967bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1968large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1969values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1970option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1971
1972@kindex --warn-once
1973@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1974@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1975@item --warn-once
1976Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1977which refers to it.
1978
1979@kindex --warn-section-align
1980@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1981@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1982@item --warn-section-align
1983Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1984alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1985The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1986is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1987the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1988
8fdd7217
NC
1989@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1990@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1991Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1992
a0c402a5
L
1993@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1994@item --warn-alternate-em
1995Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1996
560e09e9
NC
1997@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1998@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1999If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2000@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2001This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2002
2003@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2004@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2005This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2006it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2007
252b5132
RH
2008@kindex --whole-archive
2009@cindex including an entire archive
2010@item --whole-archive
2011For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2012@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2013in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2014files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2015library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2016library. This option may be used more than once.
2017
7ec229ce 2018Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2019about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2020Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2021list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2022your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2023
2509a395
SL
2024@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2025@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2026Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2027@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2028undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2029@var{symbol}.
2030
2031This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2032wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2033wishes to call the system function, it should call
2034@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2035
2036Here is a trivial example:
2037
2038@smallexample
2039void *
cc2f008e 2040__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2041@{
cc2f008e 2042 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2043 return __real_malloc (c);
2044@}
2045@end smallexample
2046
ff5dcc92 2047If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2048all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2049instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2050call the real @code{malloc} function.
2051
2052You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2053links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2054you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2055file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2056call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2057
6aa29e7b
JJ
2058@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2059@item --eh-frame-hdr
2060Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2061@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2062
6c1439be
L
2063@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2064@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2065@item --enable-new-dtags
2066@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2067This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2068systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2069@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2070If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2071created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2072those options are only available for ELF systems.
2073
2d643429 2074@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2075@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2076Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2077close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2078time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2079increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2080value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2081
fdc90cb4
JJ
2082@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2083@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2084Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2085@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2086new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2087the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2088hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2089
35835446
JR
2090@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2091@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2092This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2093linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2094for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2095about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2096
4f9c04f7 2097Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20981021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2099run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2100has been used.
2101
2102The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2103enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2104
c0065db7
RM
2105@kindex --build-id
2106@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2107@item --build-id
2108@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2109Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2110The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2111file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2112@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2113parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2114@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2115@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2116an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2117characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2118omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2119
2120The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2121that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2122unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2123to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2124file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2125string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2126
2127Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2128@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2129@end table
2130
0285c67d
NC
2131@c man end
2132
36f63dca 2133@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2134
0285c67d
NC
2135@c man begin OPTIONS
2136
ff5dcc92 2137The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2138the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2139normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2140use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2141@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2142like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2143symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2144object file).
2145
2146In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2147support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2148PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2149values by either a space or an equals sign.
2150
ff5dcc92 2151@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2152
2153@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2154@item --add-stdcall-alias
2155If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2156as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2157[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2158
2159@kindex --base-file
2160@item --base-file @var{file}
2161Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2162addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2163@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2164[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --dll
2167@item --dll
2168Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2169@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2170file.
bb10df36 2171[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2172
88183869
DK
2173@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2174@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2175@item --enable-long-section-names
2176@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2177The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2178the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2179for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2180fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2181to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2182allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2183disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2184generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2185as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2186with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2187GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2188information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2189option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2190section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2191when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2192image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2193[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2194
252b5132
RH
2195@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2196@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2197@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2198@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2199If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2200do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2201only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2202resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2203undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2204@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2205to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2206warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2207import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2208to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2209feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2210@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2211mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2212[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2213
2214@cindex DLLs, creating
2215@kindex --export-all-symbols
2216@item --export-all-symbols
2217If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2218be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2219otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2220explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2221attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2222option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2223@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2224@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2225exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2226re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2227such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2228@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2229@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2230Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2231not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2232extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2233(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2234These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2235@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2236@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2237@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2238@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2239[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2240
2241@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2242@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2243Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2244exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2245[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2246
2927aaca
NC
2247@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2248@item --exclude-all-symbols
2249Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2250[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2251
252b5132
RH
2252@kindex --file-alignment
2253@item --file-alignment
2254Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2255file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2256512.
bb10df36 2257[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2258
2259@cindex heap size
2260@kindex --heap
2261@item --heap @var{reserve}
2262@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2263Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2264to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2265committed.
bb10df36 2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2267
2268@cindex image base
2269@kindex --image-base
2270@item --image-base @var{value}
2271Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2272the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2273is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2274your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2275other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2276for dlls.
bb10df36 2277[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2278
2279@kindex --kill-at
2280@item --kill-at
2281If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2282symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2283[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2284
26d2d8a2
BF
2285@kindex --large-address-aware
2286@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2287If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2288header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2289greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2290or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2291section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2292[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2293
252b5132
RH
2294@kindex --major-image-version
2295@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2296Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2297[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2298
2299@kindex --major-os-version
2300@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2301Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2303
2304@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2305@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2306Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2308
2309@kindex --minor-image-version
2310@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2311Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@kindex --minor-os-version
2315@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2316Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2318
2319@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2320@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2321Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2322[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2323
2324@cindex DEF files, creating
2325@cindex DLLs, creating
2326@kindex --output-def
2327@item --output-def @var{file}
2328The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2329file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2330(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2331library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2332automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2334
b044cda1
CW
2335@cindex DLLs, creating
2336@kindex --out-implib
2337@item --out-implib @var{file}
2338The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2339import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2340import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2341may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2342makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2343creation step.
bb10df36 2344[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2345
2346@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2347@item --enable-auto-image-base
2348Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2349using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2350from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2351collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2352avoided.
bb10df36 2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2354
2355@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2356@item --disable-auto-image-base
2357Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2358user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2359default.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2361
2362@cindex DLLs, linking to
2363@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2364@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2365When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2366search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2367@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2368between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2369uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2370@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2372
2373@kindex --enable-auto-import
2374@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2375Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2376DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2377building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2378'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2379to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2380specification published by Microsoft.
2381
e2a83dd0
NC
2382Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2383data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2384placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2385around a problem with consts that is described here:
2386http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2387
4d8907ac
DS
2388Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2389see this message:
0d888aac 2390
ece2d90e 2391"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2392documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2393
ece2d90e
NC
2394This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2395ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2396allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2397fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2398constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2399multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2400this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2401of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2402the warning, and exit.
2403
2404There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2405data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2406
2fa9fc65
NC
2407One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2408of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2409this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2410
c0065db7
RM
2411A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2412that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2413there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2414a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2415
2416@example
2417extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2418extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2419 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2420@end example
2421
2422or
2423
2424@example
2425extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2426extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2427 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2428@end example
2429
c0065db7 2430For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2431is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2432
2433@example
2434extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2435extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2436 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2437@end example
2438
c406afaf
NC
2439or
2440
2441@example
2442extern long long extern_ll;
2443extern_ll -->
2444 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2445@end example
2446
2fa9fc65 2447A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2448'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2449@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2450requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2451building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2452merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2453between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2454constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2455
2456Original:
2457@example
2458--foo.h
2459extern int arr[];
2460--foo.c
2461#include "foo.h"
2462void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2463 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2464@}
2465@end example
2466
2467Solution 1:
2468@example
2469--foo.h
2470extern int arr[];
2471--foo.c
2472#include "foo.h"
2473void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2474 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2475 volatile int *parr = arr;
2476 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2477@}
2478@end example
2479
2480Solution 2:
2481@example
2482--foo.h
2483/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2484#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2485 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2486#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2487#else
2488#define FOO_IMPORT
2489#endif
2490extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2491--foo.c
2492#include "foo.h"
2493void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2494 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2495@}
2496@end example
2497
c0065db7 2498A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2499library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2500for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2501functions).
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2503
2504@kindex --disable-auto-import
2505@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2506Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2507@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2508[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2509
2fa9fc65
NC
2510@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2511@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2512If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2513that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2514a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2515environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2516[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2517
2518@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2519@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2520Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2521DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2523
b044cda1
CW
2524@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2525@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2526Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2527[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2528
252b5132
RH
2529@kindex --section-alignment
2530@item --section-alignment
2531Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2532addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2534
2535@cindex stack size
2536@kindex --stack
2537@item --stack @var{reserve}
2538@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2539Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2540to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2541committed.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2543
2544@kindex --subsystem
2545@item --subsystem @var{which}
2546@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2547@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2548Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2549legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2550@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2551the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2552@var{which}.
bb10df36 2553[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2554
2f563b51
DK
2555The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2556of the PE file header:
2557[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2558
2559@kindex --dynamicbase
2560@item --dynamicbase
2561The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2562randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2563Vista for i386 PE targets.
2564
2565@kindex --forceinteg
2566@item --forceinteg
2567Code integrity checks are enforced.
2568
2569@kindex --nxcompat
2570@item --nxcompat
2571The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2572This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2573
2574@kindex --no-isolation
2575@item --no-isolation
2576Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2577
2578@kindex --no-seh
2579@item --no-seh
2580The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2581this image.
2582
2583@kindex --no-bind
2584@item --no-bind
2585Do not bind this image.
2586
2587@kindex --wdmdriver
2588@item --wdmdriver
2589The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2590
2591@kindex --tsaware
2592@item --tsaware
2593The image is Terminal Server aware.
2594
252b5132
RH
2595@end table
2596
0285c67d
NC
2597@c man end
2598
93fd0973
SC
2599@ifset M68HC11
2600@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2601
2602@c man begin OPTIONS
2603
2604The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2605memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2606
2607@table @gcctabopt
2608
2609@kindex --no-trampoline
2610@item --no-trampoline
2611This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2612is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2613instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2614
2615@kindex --bank-window
2616@item --bank-window @var{name}
2617This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2618the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2619The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2620paging and addresses within the memory window.
2621
2622@end table
2623
2624@c man end
2625@end ifset
2626
7fb9f789
NC
2627@ifset M68K
2628@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2629
2630@c man begin OPTIONS
2631
2632The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2633when linking for 68K targets.
2634
2635@table @gcctabopt
2636
2637@kindex --got
2638@item --got=@var{type}
2639This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2640@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2641@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2642Info entry for @file{ld}.
2643
2644@end table
2645
2646@c man end
2647@end ifset
2648
252b5132
RH
2649@ifset UsesEnvVars
2650@node Environment
2651@section Environment Variables
2652
0285c67d
NC
2653@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2654
560e09e9 2655You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2656@ifclear SingleFormat
2657@code{GNUTARGET},
2658@end ifclear
2659@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2660
36f63dca 2661@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2662@kindex GNUTARGET
2663@cindex default input format
2664@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2665use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2666of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2667@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2668of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2669attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2670this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2671there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2672object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2673BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2674in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2675@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2676
2677@kindex LDEMULATION
2678@cindex default emulation
2679@cindex emulation, default
2680@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2681@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2682behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2683available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2684the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2685variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2686linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2687
2688@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2689@cindex demangling, default
2690Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2691@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2692default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2693a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2694may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2695options.
2696
0285c67d
NC
2697@c man end
2698@end ifset
2699
252b5132
RH
2700@node Scripts
2701@chapter Linker Scripts
2702
2703@cindex scripts
2704@cindex linker scripts
2705@cindex command files
2706Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2707written in the linker command language.
2708
2709The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2710the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2711the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2712more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2713direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2714described below.
2715
2716The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2717yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2718linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2719to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2720such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2721
2722You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2723line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2724default linker script.
2725
2726You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2727to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2728Linker Scripts}.
2729
2730@menu
2731* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2732* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2733* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2734* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2735* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2736* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2737* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2738* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2739* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2740* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2741* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2742@end menu
2743
2744@node Basic Script Concepts
2745@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2746@cindex linker script concepts
2747We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2748describe the linker script language.
2749
2750The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2751file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2752@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2753The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2754purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2755among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2756section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2757in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2758
2759Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2760also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2761contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2762the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2763A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2764area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2765loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2766which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2767of debugging information.
2768
2769Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2770first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2771the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2772@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2773section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2774same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2775is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2776(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2777based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2778RAM address would be the VMA.
2779
2780You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2781program with the @samp{-h} option.
2782
2783Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2784@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2785has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2786information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2787will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2788static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2789referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2790
2791You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2792program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2793option.
2794
2795@node Script Format
2796@section Linker Script Format
2797@cindex linker script format
2798Linker scripts are text files.
2799
2800You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2801either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2802symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2803generally ignored.
2804
2805Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2806If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2807otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2808double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2809file name.
2810
2811You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2812@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2813to whitespace.
2814
2815@node Simple Example
2816@section Simple Linker Script Example
2817@cindex linker script example
2818@cindex example of linker script
2819Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2820
2821The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2822@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2823memory layout of the output file.
2824
2825The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2826describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2827code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2828@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2829Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2830your input files.
2831
2832For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28330x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2834linker script which will do that:
2835@smallexample
2836SECTIONS
2837@{
2838 . = 0x10000;
2839 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2840 . = 0x8000000;
2841 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2842 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2843@}
2844@end smallexample
2845
2846You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2847followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2848descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2849
252b5132
RH
2850The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2851sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2852counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2853other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2854current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2855incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2856@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2857
2858The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2859required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2860after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2861which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2862wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2863means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2864
2865Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2866@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2867@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2868
2869The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2870the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2871at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2872output section, the value of the location counter will be
2873@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2874effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2875immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2876
2877The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2878alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2879example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2880sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2881may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2882sections.
2883
2884That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2885
2886@node Simple Commands
2887@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2888@cindex linker script simple commands
2889In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2890
2891@menu
2892* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2893* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2894@ifclear SingleFormat
2895* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2896@end ifclear
2897
4a93e180 2898* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2899* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2900@end menu
2901
2902@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2903@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2904@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2905@cindex start of execution
2906@cindex first instruction
2907@cindex entry point
2908The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2909point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2910entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2911@smallexample
2912ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2913@end smallexample
2914
2915There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2916entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2917stopping when one of them succeeds:
2918@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2919@item
252b5132 2920the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2921@item
252b5132 2922the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2923@item
3ab904c4
NC
2924the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2925targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2926check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2927@item
252b5132 2928the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2929@item
252b5132
RH
2930The address @code{0}.
2931@end itemize
2932
2933@node File Commands
36f63dca 2934@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2935@cindex linker script file commands
2936Several linker script commands deal with files.
2937
2938@table @code
2939@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2940@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2941@cindex including a linker script
2942Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2943be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2944with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
294510 levels deep.
2946
4006703d
NS
2947You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2948@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2949
252b5132
RH
2950@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2951@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2952@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2953@cindex input files in linker scripts
2954@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2955@cindex linker script input object files
2956The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2957in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2958
2959For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2960a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2961then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2962
2963In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2964script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2965
e3f2db7f
AO
2966In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2967with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2968located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2969for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2970open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2971linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2972description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2973
ff5dcc92 2974If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2975name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2976@samp{-l}.
2977
2978When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2979files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2980script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2981
2982@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2983@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2984@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2985@cindex grouping input files
2986The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2987files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2988new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2989in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2990
b717d30e
JJ
2991@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2992@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2993@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2994This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2995commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2996as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2997with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2998when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2999@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3000and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3001setting afterwards.
3002
252b5132
RH
3003@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3004@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3005@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3006The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3007@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3008@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3009Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3010precedence.
3011
3012You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3013output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3014
3015@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3016@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3017@cindex library search path in linker script
3018@cindex archive search path in linker script
3019@cindex search path in linker script
3020The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3021@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3022@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3023on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3024are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3025the command line option are searched first.
3026
3027@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3028@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3029@cindex first input file
3030The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3031that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3032though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3033when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3034first file.
3035@end table
3036
3037@ifclear SingleFormat
3038@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3039@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3040A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3041
3042@table @code
3043@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3044@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3045@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3046@cindex output file format in linker script
3047The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3048output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3049exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3050(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3051line option takes precedence.
3052
3053You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3054formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3055This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3056desired endianness.
3057
3058If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3059will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3060output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3061used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3062
3063For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3064command:
3065@smallexample
3066OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3067@end smallexample
3068This says that the default format for the output file is
3069@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3070option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3071format.
3072
3073@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3074@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3075@cindex input file format in linker script
3076The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3077files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3078This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3079(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3080is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3081command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3082@end table
3083@end ifclear
3084
4a93e180
NC
3085@node REGION_ALIAS
3086@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3087@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3088@cindex region alias
3089@cindex region names
3090
3091Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3092@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3093
3094@smallexample
3095REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3096@end smallexample
3097
3098The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3099memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3100to memory regions. An example follows.
3101
3102Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3103memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3104that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3105non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3106access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3107read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3108sections:
3109
3110@itemize @bullet
3111@item
3112@code{.text} program code;
3113@item
3114@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3115@item
3116@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3117@item
3118@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3119@end itemize
3120
3121The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3122part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3123output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3124systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3125@code{C}:
3126@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3127@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3128@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3129@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3130@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3131@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3132@end multitable
3133The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3134loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3135the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3136the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3137
3138The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3139includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3140memory layout:
3141@smallexample
3142INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3143
3144SECTIONS
3145 @{
3146 .text :
3147 @{
3148 *(.text)
3149 @} > REGION_TEXT
3150 .rodata :
3151 @{
3152 *(.rodata)
3153 rodata_end = .;
3154 @} > REGION_RODATA
3155 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3156 @{
3157 data_start = .;
3158 *(.data)
3159 @} > REGION_DATA
3160 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3161 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3162 .bss :
3163 @{
3164 *(.bss)
3165 @} > REGION_BSS
3166 @}
3167@end smallexample
3168
3169Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3170regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3171variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3172@table @code
3173@item A
3174Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3175@smallexample
3176MEMORY
3177 @{
3178 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3179 @}
3180
3181REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3182REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3183REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3184REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3185@end smallexample
3186@item B
3187Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3188into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3189@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3190@smallexample
3191MEMORY
3192 @{
3193 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3194 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3195 @}
3196
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3200REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3201@end smallexample
3202@item C
3203Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3204@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3205initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3206system start into the @code{RAM}.
3207@smallexample
3208MEMORY
3209 @{
3210 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3211 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3212 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3213 @}
3214
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3216REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3217REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3218REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3219@end smallexample
3220@end table
3221
3222It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3223@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3224necessary:
3225@smallexample
3226#include <string.h>
3227
3228extern char data_start [];
3229extern char data_size [];
3230extern char data_load_start [];
3231
3232void copy_data(void)
3233@{
3234 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3235 @{
3236 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3237 @}
3238@}
3239@end smallexample
3240
252b5132 3241@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3242@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3243There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3244
3245@table @code
3246@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3247@kindex ASSERT
3248@cindex assertion in linker script
3249Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3250with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3251
3252@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3253@kindex EXTERN
3254@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3255Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3256symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3257modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3258each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3259command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3260
3261@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3262@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3263@cindex common allocation in linker script
3264This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3265to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3266output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3267
4818e05f
AM
3268@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3269@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3270@cindex common allocation in linker script
3271This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3272command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3273to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3274
53d25da6
AM
3275@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3276@kindex INSERT
3277@cindex insert user script into default script
3278This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3279augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3280inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3281@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3282default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3283sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3284linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3285insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3286linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3287default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3288of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3289to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3290is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3291
3292@smallexample
3293SECTIONS
3294@{
3295 OVERLAY :
3296 @{
3297 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3298 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3299 @}
3300@}
3301INSERT AFTER .text;
3302@end smallexample
3303
252b5132
RH
3304@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3305@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3306@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3307This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3308references among certain output sections.
3309
3310In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3311using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3312will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3313errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3314a function defined in the other section.
3315
3316The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3317@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3318an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3319@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3320names.
3321
3322@ifclear SingleFormat
3323@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3324@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3325@cindex machine architecture
3326@cindex architecture
3327Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3328of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3329architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3330the @samp{-f} option.
3331@end ifclear
3332@end table
3333
3334@node Assignments
3335@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3336@cindex assignment in scripts
3337@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3338@cindex variables, defining
3339You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3340the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3341
3342@menu
3343* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3344* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3345* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3346* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3347@end menu
3348
3349@node Simple Assignments
3350@subsection Simple Assignments
3351
3352You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3353
3354@table @code
3355@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3356@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3357@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3358@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3359@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3360@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3361@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3362@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3363@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3364@end table
3365
3366The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3367@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3368defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3369
3370The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3371may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3372
3373The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3374
3375Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3376
3377You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3378statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3379section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3380
3381The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3382expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3383
3384Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3385assignments may be used:
3386
3387@smallexample
3388floating_point = 0;
3389SECTIONS
3390@{
3391 .text :
3392 @{
3393 *(.text)
3394 _etext = .;
3395 @}
156e34dd 3396 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3397 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3398@}
3399@end smallexample
3400@noindent
3401In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3402zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3403the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3404defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3405upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3406
3407@node PROVIDE
3408@subsection PROVIDE
3409@cindex PROVIDE
3410In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3411only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3412the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3413@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3414@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3415@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3416@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3417@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3418
3419Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3420@smallexample
3421SECTIONS
3422@{
3423 .text :
3424 @{
3425 *(.text)
3426 _etext = .;
3427 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3428 @}
3429@}
3430@end smallexample
3431
3432In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3433underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3434the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3435underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3436If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3437linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3438
7af8e998
L
3439@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3440@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3441@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3442Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3443hidden and won't be exported.
3444
73ae6183
NC
3445@node Source Code Reference
3446@subsection Source Code Reference
3447
3448Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3449intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3450a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3451symbol that does not have a value.
3452
3453Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3454transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3455stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3456prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3457mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3458of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3459variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3460linker script variable might be referred to as:
3461
3462@smallexample
3463 extern int foo;
3464@end smallexample
3465
3466But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3467
3468@smallexample
3469 _foo = 1000;
3470@end smallexample
3471
3472In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3473transformation has taken place.
3474
3475When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3476things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3477in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3478second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3479table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3480contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3481value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3482
3483@smallexample
3484 int foo = 1000;
3485@end smallexample
3486
3487creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3488holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3489number 1000 is initially stored.
3490
3491When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3492first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3493memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3494So:
3495
3496@smallexample
3497 foo = 1;
3498@end smallexample
3499
3500looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3501associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3502address. Whereas:
3503
3504@smallexample
3505 int * a = & foo;
3506@end smallexample
3507
3508looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3509and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3510the variable @samp{a}.
3511
3512Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3513the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3514an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3515
3516@smallexample
3517 foo = 1000;
3518@end smallexample
3519
3520creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3521the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3522address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3523linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3524access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3525
3526Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3527you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3528use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3529section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3530linker script contains these declarations:
3531
3532@smallexample
3533@group
3534 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3535 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3536 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3537@end group
3538@end smallexample
3539
3540Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3541
3542@smallexample
3543@group
3544 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3545
73ae6183
NC
3546 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3547@end group
3548@end smallexample
3549
3550Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3551
252b5132 3552@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3553@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3554@kindex SECTIONS
3555The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3556into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3557
3558The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3559@smallexample
3560SECTIONS
3561@{
3562 @var{sections-command}
3563 @var{sections-command}
3564 @dots{}
3565@}
3566@end smallexample
3567
3568Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3569
3570@itemize @bullet
3571@item
3572an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3573@item
3574a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3575@item
3576an output section description
3577@item
3578an overlay description
3579@end itemize
3580
3581The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3582@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3583those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3584understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3585the layout of the output file.
3586
3587Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3588below.
3589
3590If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3591linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3592section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3593input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3594example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3595in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3596
3597@menu
3598* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3599* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3600* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3601* Input Section:: Input section description
3602* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3603* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3604* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3605* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3606* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3607@end menu
3608
3609@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3610@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3611The full description of an output section looks like this:
3612@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3613@group
7e7d5768 3614@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3615 [AT(@var{lma})]
3616 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3617 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3618 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3619 @{
3620 @var{output-section-command}
3621 @var{output-section-command}
3622 @dots{}
562d3460 3623 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3624@end group
3625@end smallexample
3626
3627Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3628
3629The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3630name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3631The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3632
3633Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3634
3635@itemize @bullet
3636@item
3637a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3638@item
3639an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3640@item
3641data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3642@item
3643a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3644@end itemize
3645
3646@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3647@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3648@cindex name, section
3649@cindex section name
3650The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3651meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3652support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3653must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3654example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3655output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3656names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3657quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3658characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3659commas must be quoted.
3660
3661The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3662Discarding}.
3663
3664@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3665@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3666@cindex address, section
3667@cindex section address
3668The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3669address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3670the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3671based on the current value of the location counter.
3672
3673If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3674set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3675@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3676current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3677requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3678output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3679within the output section.
3680
3681For example,
3682@smallexample
3683.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3684@end smallexample
3685@noindent
3686and
3687@smallexample
3688.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3689@end smallexample
3690@noindent
3691are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3692@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3693counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3694counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3695section.
3696
3697The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3698For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3699so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3700do something like this:
3701@smallexample
3702.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3703@end smallexample
3704@noindent
3705This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3706aligned upward to the specified value.
3707
3708Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3709location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3710sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3711
3712@node Input Section
36f63dca 3713@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3714@cindex input sections
3715@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3716The most common output section command is an input section description.
3717
3718The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3719You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3720in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3721map the input files into your memory layout.
3722
3723@menu
3724* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3725* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3726* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3727* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3728* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3729@end menu
3730
3731@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3732@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3733@cindex input section basics
3734An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3735by a list of section names in parentheses.
3736
3737The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3738describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3739
3740The most common input section description is to include all input
3741sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3742include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3743@smallexample
3744*(.text)
3745@end smallexample
3746@noindent
18625d54
CM
3747Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3748of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3749match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3750example:
252b5132 3751@smallexample
b4346c09 3752*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3753@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3754will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3755@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3756
3757There are two ways to include more than one section:
3758@smallexample
3759*(.text .rdata)
3760*(.text) *(.rdata)
3761@end smallexample
3762@noindent
3763The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3764@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3765first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3766they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3767@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3768@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3769
3770You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3771You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3772needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3773@smallexample
3774data.o(.data)
3775@end smallexample
3776
967928e9
AM
3777You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3778matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3779with no whitespace around the colon.
3780
3781@table @samp
3782@item archive:file
3783matches file within archive
3784@item archive:
3785matches the whole archive
3786@item :file
3787matches file but not one in an archive
3788@end table
3789
3790Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3791wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3792single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3793@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3794within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3795also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3796other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3797from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3798command.
3799
252b5132
RH
3800If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3801the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3802commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3803@smallexample
3804data.o
3805@end smallexample
3806
967928e9
AM
3807When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3808and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3809characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3810name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3811did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3812though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3813@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3814the archive search path.
3815
3816@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3817@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3818@cindex input section wildcards
3819@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3820@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3821@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3822In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3823name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3824
3825The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3826pattern for the file name.
3827
3828The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3829
3830@table @samp
3831@item *
3832matches any number of characters
3833@item ?
3834matches any single character
3835@item [@var{chars}]
3836matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3837character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3838@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3839@item \
3840quotes the following character
3841@end table
3842
3843When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3844will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3845Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3846exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3847@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3848a @samp{/} character.
3849
3850File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3851specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3852does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3853
3854If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3855appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3856will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3857sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3858@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3859@smallexample
3860.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3861.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3862@end smallexample
3863
bcaa7b3e 3864@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3865Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3866in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3867this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3868pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3869@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3870into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3871
bcaa7b3e
L
3872@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3873@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3874difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3875ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3876
3877@cindex SORT
3878@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3879
3880When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3881can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3882
3883@enumerate
3884@item
3885@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3886It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3887sections have the same name.
3888@item
3889@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3890It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3891sections have the same alignment.
3892@item
c0065db7 3893@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3894treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3895@item
3896@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3897is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3898@item
3899All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3900@end enumerate
3901
3902When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3903section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3904takes precedence over the command line option.
3905
3906If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3907command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3908treated as nested sorting command.
3909
3910@enumerate
3911@item
3912@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3913@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3914@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3915@item
3916@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3917@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3918@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3919@end enumerate
3920
3921If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3922command line option will be ignored.
3923
252b5132
RH
3924If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3925@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3926precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3927
3928This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3929files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3930sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3931The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3932with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3933linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3934@smallexample
3935@group
3936SECTIONS @{
3937 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3938 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3939 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3940 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3941@}
3942@end group
3943@end smallexample
3944
3945@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3946@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3947@cindex common symbol placement
3948@cindex uninitialized data placement
3949A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3950file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3951linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3952named @samp{COMMON}.
3953
3954You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3955other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3956particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3957input files are placed in another section.
3958
3959In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3960@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3961@smallexample
3962.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3963@end smallexample
3964
3965@cindex scommon section
3966@cindex small common symbols
3967Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3968example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3969symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3970different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3971the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3972symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3973to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3974locations.
3975
3976@cindex [COMMON]
3977You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3978notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3979@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3980
3981@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3982@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3983@cindex KEEP
3984@cindex garbage collection
3985When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3986it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3987This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3988with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3989@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3990
3991@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3992@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3993The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3994to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3995start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3996@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3997follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3998@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3999@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4000All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4001files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4002
4003@smallexample
4004@group
4005SECTIONS @{
4006 outputa 0x10000 :
4007 @{
4008 all.o
4009 foo.o (.input1)
4010 @}
36f63dca
NC
4011@end group
4012@group
252b5132
RH
4013 outputb :
4014 @{
4015 foo.o (.input2)
4016 foo1.o (.input1)
4017 @}
36f63dca
NC
4018@end group
4019@group
252b5132
RH
4020 outputc :
4021 @{
4022 *(.input1)
4023 *(.input2)
4024 @}
4025@}
4026@end group
a1ab1d2a 4027@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4028
4029@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4030@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4031@cindex data
4032@cindex section data
4033@cindex output section data
4034@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4035@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4036@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4037@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4038@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4039You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4040@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4041an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4042parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4043value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4044counter.
4045
4046The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4047store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4048bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4049stored.
4050
4051For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4052of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4053@smallexample
4054BYTE(1)
4055LONG(addr)
4056@end smallexample
4057
4058When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4059same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4060target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4061@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4062@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4063
4064If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4065which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4066When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4067true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4068endianness of the first input object file.
4069
36f63dca 4070Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4071between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4072@smallexample
4073SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4074@end smallexample
4075whereas this will work:
4076@smallexample
4077SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4078@end smallexample
4079
252b5132
RH
4080@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4081@cindex holes, filling
4082@cindex unspecified memory
4083You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4084current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4085otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4086gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4087with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4088necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4089point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4090than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4091different parts of an output section.
4092
4093This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4094value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4095@smallexample
563e308f 4096FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4097@end smallexample
4098
4099The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4100section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4101part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4102entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4103precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4104expression.
252b5132
RH
4105
4106@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4107@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4108There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4109commands.
4110
4111@table @code
4112@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4113@cindex input filename symbols
4114@cindex filename symbols
4115@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4116The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4117The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4118file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4119the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4120
4121This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4122normally used for any other object file format.
4123
4124@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4125@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4126@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4127@item CONSTRUCTORS
4128When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4129unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4130destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4131arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4132automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4133For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4134linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4135@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4136ignored for other object file formats.
4137
4138The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4139constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4140Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4141the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4142first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4143of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4144compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4145formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4146@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4147the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4148destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4149@code{exit}.
4150
4151For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4152arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4153addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4154and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4155linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4156runtime code expects to see.
4157
4158@smallexample
4159 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4160 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4161 *(.ctors)
4162 LONG(0)
4163 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4164 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4165 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4166 *(.dtors)
4167 LONG(0)
4168 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4169@end smallexample
4170
4171If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4172which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4173are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4174are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4175command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4176@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4177@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4178@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4179
4180Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4181and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4182need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4183scripts.
4184
4185@end table
4186
4187@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4188@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4189@cindex discarding sections
4190@cindex sections, discarding
4191@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4192The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4193for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4194be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4195@smallexample
49c13adb 4196.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4197@end smallexample
4198@noindent
4199will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4200@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4201sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4202space in an output section will also create the output section.
4203
a0976ea4 4204The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4205on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4206symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4207the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4208section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4209
4210@cindex /DISCARD/
4211The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4212input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4213section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4214
4215@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4216@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4217@cindex output section attributes
4218We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4219like this:
0c71d759 4220
252b5132 4221@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4222@group
7e7d5768 4223@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4224 [AT(@var{lma})]
4225 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4226 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4227 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4228 @{
4229 @var{output-section-command}
4230 @var{output-section-command}
4231 @dots{}
562d3460 4232 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4233@end group
4234@end smallexample
0c71d759 4235
252b5132
RH
4236We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4237@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4238remaining section attributes.
4239
a1ab1d2a 4240@menu
252b5132
RH
4241* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4242* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4243* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4244* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4245* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4246* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4247* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4248* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4249@end menu
4250
4251@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4252@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4253Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4254parentheses. The following types are defined:
4255
4256@table @code
4257@item NOLOAD
4258The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4259loaded into memory when the program is run.
4260@item DSECT
4261@itemx COPY
4262@itemx INFO
4263@itemx OVERLAY
4264These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4265rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4266marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4267section when the program is run.
4268@end table
4269
4270@kindex NOLOAD
4271@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4272@cindex loading, preventing
4273The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4274the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4275the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4276@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4277need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4278@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4279@smallexample
4280@group
4281SECTIONS @{
4282 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4283 @dots{}
4284@}
4285@end group
4286@end smallexample
4287
4288@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4289@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4290@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4291@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4292@cindex load address
4293@cindex section load address
4294Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4295@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4296an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4297Address}).
4298
dc0b6aa0
AM
4299The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4300the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4301
4302Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4303specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4304Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4305linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4306
4307If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4308section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4309VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4310section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4311or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4312to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4313@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4314
4315@cindex ROM initialized data
4316@cindex initialized data in ROM
4317This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4318example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4319called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4320@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4321even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4322uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4323defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4324counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4325
4326@smallexample
4327@group
4328SECTIONS
4329 @{
4330 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4331 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4332 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4333 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4334 .bss 0x3000 :
4335 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4336@}
4337@end group
4338@end smallexample
4339
4340The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4341this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4342the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4343how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4344script.
4345
4346@smallexample
4347@group
4348extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4349char *src = &_etext;
4350char *dst = &_data;
4351
4352/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4353while (dst < &_edata) @{
4354 *dst++ = *src++;
4355@}
4356
4357/* Zero bss */
4358for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4359 *dst = 0;
4360@end group
4361@end smallexample
4362
bbf115d3
L
4363@node Forced Output Alignment
4364@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4365@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4366@cindex forcing output section alignment
4367@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4368You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4369
7e7d5768
AM
4370@node Forced Input Alignment
4371@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4372@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4373@cindex forcing input section alignment
4374@cindex input section alignment
4375You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4376SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4377sections, whether larger or smaller.
4378
0c71d759
NC
4379@node Output Section Constraint
4380@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4381@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4382@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4383@cindex constraints on output sections
4384You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4385of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4386read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4387@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4388
252b5132 4389@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4390@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4391@kindex >@var{region}
4392@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4393@cindex memory regions and sections
4394You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4395using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4396
4397Here is a simple example:
4398@smallexample
4399@group
4400MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4401SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4402@end group
4403@end smallexample
4404
4405@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4406@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4407@kindex :@var{phdr}
4408@cindex section, assigning to program header
4409@cindex program headers and sections
4410You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4411using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4412one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4413assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4414@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4415linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4416
4417Here is a simple example:
4418@smallexample
4419@group
4420PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4421SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4422@end group
4423@end smallexample
4424
4425@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4426@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4427@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4428@cindex section fill pattern
4429@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4430You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4431@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4432(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4433within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4434alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4435necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4436of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4437an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4438fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4439other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4440pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4441expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4442
4443You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4444output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4445
4446Here is a simple example:
4447@smallexample
4448@group
563e308f 4449SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4450@end group
4451@end smallexample
4452
4453@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4454@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4455@kindex OVERLAY
4456@cindex overlays
4457An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4458are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4459the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4460copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4461required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4462can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4463than another.
4464
4465Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4466@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4467output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4468command is as follows:
4469@smallexample
4470@group
4471OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4472 @{
4473 @var{secname1}
4474 @{
4475 @var{output-section-command}
4476 @var{output-section-command}
4477 @dots{}
4478 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4479 @var{secname2}
4480 @{
4481 @var{output-section-command}
4482 @var{output-section-command}
4483 @dots{}
4484 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4485 @dots{}
4486 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4487@end group
4488@end smallexample
4489
4490Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4491section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4492section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4493those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4494except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4495sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4496
4497The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4498addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4499memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4500whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4501and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4502and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4503
4504If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4505among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4506all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4507section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4508NOCROSSREFS}.
4509
4510For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4511provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4512defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4513@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4514the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4515within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4516symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4517
4518At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4519the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4520
4521Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4522@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4523@smallexample
4524@group
4525 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4526 @{
4527 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4528 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4529 @}
4530@end group
4531@end smallexample
4532@noindent
4533This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4534address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4535@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4536following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4537@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4538@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4539
4540C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4541like the following.
4542
4543@smallexample
4544@group
4545 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4546 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4547 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4548@end group
4549@end smallexample
4550
4551Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4552everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4553example could have been written identically as follows.
4554
4555@smallexample
4556@group
4557 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4558 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4559 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4560 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4561 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4562 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4563 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4564@end group
4565@end smallexample
4566
4567@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4568@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4569@kindex MEMORY
4570@cindex memory regions
4571@cindex regions of memory
4572@cindex allocating memory
4573@cindex discontinuous memory
4574The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4575memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4576
4577The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4578memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4579may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4580can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4581set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4582regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4583around to fit into the available regions.
4584
4585A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4586command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4587you wish. The syntax is:
4588@smallexample
4589@group
a1ab1d2a 4590MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4591 @{
4592 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4593 @dots{}
4594 @}
4595@end group
4596@end smallexample
4597
4598The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4599region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4600Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4601with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4602must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4603add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4604command.
252b5132
RH
4605
4606@cindex memory region attributes
4607The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4608whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4609not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4610@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4611section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4612the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4613them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4614
4615The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4616@table @samp
4617@item R
4618Read-only section
4619@item W
4620Read/write section
4621@item X
4622Executable section
4623@item A
4624Allocatable section
4625@item I
4626Initialized section
4627@item L
4628Same as @samp{I}
4629@item !
4630Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4631@end table
4632
4633If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4634@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4635attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4636in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4637attributes.
4638
4639@kindex ORIGIN =
4640@kindex o =
4641@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4642The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4643the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4644cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4645abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4646@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4647
4648@kindex LENGTH =
4649@kindex len =
4650@kindex l =
4651The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4652region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4653be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4654@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4655
4656In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4657available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4658and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4659linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4660is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4661or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4662explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4663region.
4664
4665@smallexample
4666@group
a1ab1d2a 4667MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4668 @{
4669 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4670 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4671 @}
4672@end group
4673@end smallexample
4674
4675Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4676specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4677@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4678a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4679output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4680was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4681the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4682output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4683region, the linker will issue an error message.
4684
3ec57632 4685It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4686expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4687@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4688
4689@smallexample
4690@group
c0065db7 4691 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4692@end group
4693@end smallexample
4694
252b5132
RH
4695@node PHDRS
4696@section PHDRS Command
4697@kindex PHDRS
4698@cindex program headers
4699@cindex ELF program headers
4700@cindex program segments
4701@cindex segments, ELF
4702The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4703@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4704loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4705program with the @samp{-p} option.
4706
4707When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4708reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4709program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4710This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4711interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4712
4713The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4714in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4715precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4716the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4717not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4718
4719The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4720generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4721ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4722
4723This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4724@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4725
4726@smallexample
4727@group
4728PHDRS
4729@{
4730 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4731 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4732@}
4733@end group
4734@end smallexample
4735
4736The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4737of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4738header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4739with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4740must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4741is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4742
4743Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4744system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4745specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4746sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4747attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4748Section Phdr}.
4749
4750It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4751merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4752repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4753contain the section.
4754
4755If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4756then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4757not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4758convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4759placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4760default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4761segment at all.
4762
4763@kindex FILEHDR
4764@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4765You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4766the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4767The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4768file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4769include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4770segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4771these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4772
4773The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4774value of the keyword.
4775
4776@table @asis
4777@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4778Indicates an unused program header.
4779
4780@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4781Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4782the file.
4783
4784@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4785Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4786
4787@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4788Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4789found.
4790
4791@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4792Indicates a segment holding note information.
4793
4794@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4795A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4796ABI.
4797
4798@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4799Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4800
4801@item @var{expression}
4802An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4803be used for types not defined above.
4804@end table
4805
4806You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4807in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4808@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4809Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4810output section attribute.
4811
4812The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4813which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4814explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4815an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4816header.
4817
4818Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4819headers used on a native ELF system.
4820
4821@example
4822@group
4823PHDRS
4824@{
4825 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4826 interp PT_INTERP ;
4827 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4828 data PT_LOAD ;
4829 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4830@}
4831
4832SECTIONS
4833@{
4834 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4835 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4836 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4837 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4838 @dots{}
4839 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4840 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4841 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4842 @dots{}
4843@}
4844@end group
4845@end example
4846
4847@node VERSION
4848@section VERSION Command
4849@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4850@cindex symbol versions
4851@cindex version script
4852@cindex versions of symbols
4853The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4854only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4855symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4856a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4857shared library.
4858
4859You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4860you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4861also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4862
4863The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4864@smallexample
4865VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4866@end smallexample
4867
4868The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4869Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4870version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4871version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4872version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4873scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4874library.
4875
4876The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4877examples.
4878
4879@smallexample
4880VERS_1.1 @{
4881 global:
4882 foo1;
4883 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4884 old*;
4885 original*;
4886 new*;
252b5132
RH
4887@};
4888
4889VERS_1.2 @{
4890 foo2;
4891@} VERS_1.1;
4892
4893VERS_2.0 @{
4894 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4895 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4896 ns::*;
4897 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4898 @}
252b5132
RH
4899@} VERS_1.2;
4900@end smallexample
4901
4902This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4903version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4904The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4905a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4906of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4907symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4908is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4909in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4910However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4911name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4912
4913Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4914depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4915to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4916
4917Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4918depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4919and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4920
4921When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4922specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4923unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4924unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4925somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4926wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4927wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4928set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4929ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4930
4931The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4932they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4933could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4934However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4935
0f6bf451 4936Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4937in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4938symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4939won't.
4940
4941@smallexample
7c9c73be 4942@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4943@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4944
252b5132
RH
4945When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4946symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4947requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4948shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4949loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4950linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4951application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4952way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4953all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4954search for each symbol reference.
4955
4956The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4957doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4958that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4959functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4960the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4961required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4962that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4963versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4964the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4965
4966There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4967first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4968source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4969script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4970maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4971@smallexample
4972__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4973@end smallexample
4974@noindent
4975in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4976be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4977The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4978@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4979takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4980
4981The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4982function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4983an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4984version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4985linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4986
4987To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4988source file. Here is an example:
4989
4990@smallexample
4991__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4992__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4993__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4994__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4995@end smallexample
4996
4997In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4998unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4999example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5000@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5001
5002When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5003some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5004this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5005@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5006declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5007you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5008
5009If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5010within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5011(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5012specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5013
cb840a31
L
5014You can also specify the language in the version script:
5015
5016@smallexample
5017VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5018@end smallexample
5019
c0065db7 5020The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5021The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5022demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5023patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
5024
86043bbb
MM
5025Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5026described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5027or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5028the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5029whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5030cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5031might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5032should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5033expect when you upgrade.
5034
252b5132
RH
5035@node Expressions
5036@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5037@cindex expressions
5038@cindex arithmetic
5039The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5040that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5041expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5042host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5043
5044You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5045
5046The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5047expressions.
5048
5049@menu
5050* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5051* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5052* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5053* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5054* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5055* Operators:: Operators
5056* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5057* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5058* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5059@end menu
5060
5061@node Constants
5062@subsection Constants
5063@cindex integer notation
5064@cindex constants in linker scripts
5065All constants are integers.
5066
5067As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5068octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5069hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5070@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5071@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5072value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5073
5074@cindex scaled integers
5075@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5076@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5077@cindex suffixes for integers
5078@cindex integer suffixes
5079In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5080constant by
5081@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5082@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5083@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5084@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5085@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5086@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5087@tex
5088${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5089@end tex
5090@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5091respectively. For example, the following
5092all refer to the same quantity:
5093
252b5132 5094@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5095_fourk_1 = 4K;
5096_fourk_2 = 4096;
5097_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5098_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5099@end smallexample
5100
8a308ae8
NC
5101Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5102conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5103
0c71d759
NC
5104@node Symbolic Constants
5105@subsection Symbolic Constants
5106@cindex symbolic constants
5107@kindex CONSTANT
5108It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5109the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5110
5111@table @code
5112@item MAXPAGESIZE
5113@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5114The target's maximum page size.
5115
5116@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5117@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5118The target's default page size.
5119@end table
5120
5121So for example:
5122
5123@smallexample
5124 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5125@end smallexample
5126
5127will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5128supported by the target.
5129
252b5132
RH
5130@node Symbols
5131@subsection Symbol Names
5132@cindex symbol names
5133@cindex names
5134@cindex quoted symbol names
5135@kindex "
5136Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5137and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5138Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5139specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5140keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5141@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5142"SECTION" = 9;
5143"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5144@end smallexample
5145
5146Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5147to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5148whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5149
ecca9871
L
5150@node Orphan Sections
5151@subsection Orphan Sections
5152@cindex orphan
5153Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5154are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5155script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5156output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5157placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5158attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5159same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5160If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5161at the end of the file.
5162
5163For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5164well as section flag.
5165
41911f68 5166If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5167the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5168__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5169section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5170orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5171representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5172character.
5173
252b5132
RH
5174@node Location Counter
5175@subsection The Location Counter
5176@kindex .
5177@cindex dot
5178@cindex location counter
5179@cindex current output location
5180The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5181current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5182location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5183within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5184anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5185
5186@cindex holes
5187Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5188moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5189location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5190and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5191doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5192
5193@smallexample
5194SECTIONS
5195@{
5196 output :
5197 @{
5198 file1(.text)
5199 . = . + 1000;
5200 file2(.text)
5201 . += 1000;
5202 file3(.text)
563e308f 5203 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5204@}
5205@end smallexample
5206@noindent
5207In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5208located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5209followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5210@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5211@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5212specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5213
5c6bbab8
NC
5214@cindex dot inside sections
5215Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5216current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5217statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5218absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5219however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5220not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5221
5222@smallexample
5223SECTIONS
5224@{
5225 . = 0x100
5226 .text: @{
5227 *(.text)
5228 . = 0x200
5229 @}
5230 . = 0x500
5231 .data: @{
5232 *(.data)
5233 . += 0x600
5234 @}
5235@}
5236@end smallexample
5237
5238The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5239and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5240the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5241much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5242move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5243and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5244the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5245the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5246
b5666f2f
AM
5247@cindex dot outside sections
5248Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5249output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5250needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5251
5252@smallexample
5253SECTIONS
5254@{
5255 start_of_text = . ;
5256 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5257 end_of_text = . ;
5258
5259 start_of_data = . ;
5260 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5261 end_of_data = . ;
5262@}
5263@end smallexample
5264
5265If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5266not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5267between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5268should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5269blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5270the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5271sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5272statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5273special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5274place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5275as follows:
5276
5277@smallexample
5278SECTIONS
5279@{
5280 start_of_text = . ;
5281 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5282 end_of_text = . ;
5283
5284 start_of_data = . ;
5285 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5286 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5287 end_of_data = . ;
5288@}
5289@end smallexample
5290
5291This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5292@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5293placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5294assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5295a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5296section. So you could write:
5297
5298@smallexample
5299SECTIONS
5300@{
5301 start_of_text = . ;
5302 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5303 end_of_text = . ;
5304
5305 . = . ;
5306 start_of_data = . ;
5307 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5308 end_of_data = . ;
5309@}
5310@end smallexample
5311
5312Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5313@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5314
252b5132
RH
5315@need 2000
5316@node Operators
5317@subsection Operators
5318@cindex operators for arithmetic
5319@cindex arithmetic operators
5320@cindex precedence in expressions
5321The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5322the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5323@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5324@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5325@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5326@smallexample
5327precedence associativity Operators Notes
5328(highest)
53291 left ! - ~ (1)
53302 left * / %
53313 left + -
53324 left >> <<
53335 left == != > < <= >=
53346 left &
53357 left |
53368 left &&
53379 left ||
533810 right ? :
533911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5340(lowest)
5341@end smallexample
5342Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5343(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5344(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5345@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5346@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5347@tex
5348\vskip \baselineskip
5349%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5350\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5351\hrule
5352\halign
5353{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5354height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5355&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5356height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5357\noalign{\hrule}
5358height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5359&highest&&&&&\cr
5360% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5361&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5362&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5363&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5364&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5365&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5366&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5367&7&&left&&|&\cr
5368&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5369&9&&left&&||&\cr
5370&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5371&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5372&lowest&&&&&\cr
5373height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5374\hrule}
5375@end tex
5376@iftex
5377{
5378@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5379@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5380@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5381}
5382@end iftex
5383@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5384
5385@node Evaluation
5386@subsection Evaluation
5387@cindex lazy evaluation
5388@cindex expression evaluation order
5389The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5390an expression when absolutely necessary.
5391
5392The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5393address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5394regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5395as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5396
5397However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5398until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5399other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5400for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5401
5402The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5403assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5404allocation.
5405
5406Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5407@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5408
5409If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5410available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5411following
5412@smallexample
5413@group
5414SECTIONS
5415 @{
a1ab1d2a 5416 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5417 @{ *(.text) @}
5418 @}
5419@end group
5420@end smallexample
5421@noindent
5422will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5423address}.
5424
5425@node Expression Section
5426@subsection The Section of an Expression
5427@cindex expression sections
5428@cindex absolute expressions
5429@cindex relative expressions
5430@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5431@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5432@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5433When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5434or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5435fixed offset from the base of a section.
5436
5437The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5438whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5439an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5440section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5441
5442A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5443relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5444further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5445section will be the section of the relative expression.
5446
5447A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5448through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5449will not have any particular associated section.
5450
5451You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5452to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5453create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5454section @samp{.data}:
5455@smallexample
5456SECTIONS
5457 @{
5458 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5459 @}
5460@end smallexample
5461@noindent
5462If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5463@samp{.data} section.
5464
5465@node Builtin Functions
5466@subsection Builtin Functions
5467@cindex functions in expressions
5468The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5469use in linker script expressions.
5470
5471@table @code
5472@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5473@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5474@cindex expression, absolute
5475Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5476of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5477value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5478normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5479
5480@item ADDR(@var{section})
5481@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5482@cindex section address in expression
5483Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5484script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5485the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5486identical values:
5487@smallexample
5488@group
5489SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5490 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5491 @{
252b5132
RH
5492 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5493 @dots{}
5494 @}
5495 .output :
5496 @{
5497 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5498 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5499 @}
5500@dots{} @}
5501@end group
5502@end smallexample
5503
876f4090
NS
5504@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5505@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5506@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5507@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5508@cindex round up location counter
5509@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5510@cindex round up expression
5511@cindex align expression
5512Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5513to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5514doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5515arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5516expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5517equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5518
5519Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5520next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5521variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5522input sections:
252b5132
RH
5523@smallexample
5524@group
5525SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5526 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5527 *(.data)
5528 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5529 @}
5530@dots{} @}
5531@end group
5532@end smallexample
5533@noindent
5534The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5535a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5536a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5537of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5538
5539The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5540
362c1d1a
NS
5541@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5542@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5543@cindex section alignment
5544Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5545been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5546evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5547the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5548value in that section.
5549@smallexample
5550@group
5551SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5552 .output @{
5553 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5554 @dots{}
5555 @}
5556@dots{} @}
5557@end group
5558@end smallexample
5559
252b5132
RH
5560@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5561@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5562This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5563scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5564section.
5565
2d20f7bf
JJ
5566@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5567@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5568This is equivalent to either
5569@smallexample
5570(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5571@end smallexample
5572or
5573@smallexample
5574(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5575@end smallexample
5576@noindent
5577depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5578for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5579@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5580If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5581memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5582bytes in the on-disk file.
5583
5584This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5585any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5586@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5587be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5588working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5589
5590@noindent
5591Example:
5592@smallexample
5593 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5594@end smallexample
5595
5596@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5597@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5598This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5599evaluation purposes.
5600
5601@smallexample
5602 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5603@end smallexample
5604
a4f5ad88
JJ
5605@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5606@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5607This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5608@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5609When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5610does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5611@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5612boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5613it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5614@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5615
5616@smallexample
5617 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5618@end smallexample
5619
252b5132
RH
5620@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5621@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5622@cindex symbol defaults
5623Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5624defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5625return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5626default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5627shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5628the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5629existed, its value is preserved:
5630
5631@smallexample
5632@group
5633SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5634 .text : @{
5635 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5636 @dots{}
5637 @}
5638 @dots{}
5639@}
5640@end group
5641@end smallexample
5642
3ec57632
NC
5643@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5644@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5645Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5646
252b5132
RH
5647@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5648@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5649@cindex section load address in expression
5650Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5651the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5652attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5653Section LMA}).
5654
5655@kindex MAX
5656@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5657Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5658
5659@kindex MIN
5660@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5661Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5662
5663@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5664@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5665@cindex unallocated address, next
5666Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5667This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5668use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5669output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5670
3ec57632
NC
5671@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5672@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5673Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5674
ba916c8a
MM
5675@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5676@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5677Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5678value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5679option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5680@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5681be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5682``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5683name.
5684
252b5132
RH
5685@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5686@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5687@cindex section size
5688Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5689been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5690evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5691@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5692@smallexample
5693@group
5694SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5695 .output @{
5696 .start = . ;
5697 @dots{}
5698 .end = . ;
5699 @}
5700 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5701 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5702@dots{} @}
5703@end group
5704@end smallexample
5705
5706@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5707@itemx sizeof_headers
5708@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5709@cindex header size
5710Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5711information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5712this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5713choose, to facilitate paging.
5714
5715@cindex not enough room for program headers
5716@cindex program headers, not enough room
5717When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5718@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5719number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5720addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5721additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5722room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5723the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5724script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5725you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5726command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5727@end table
5728
5729@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5730@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5731@cindex implicit linker scripts
5732If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5733an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5734linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5735linker will report an error.
5736
5737An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5738
5739Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5740assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5741commands.
5742
5743Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5744at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5745read. This can affect archive searching.
5746
5747@ifset GENERIC
5748@node Machine Dependent
5749@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5750
5751@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5752@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5753sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5754functionality are not listed.
5755
5756@menu
36f63dca
NC
5757@ifset H8300
5758* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5759@end ifset
5760@ifset I960
5761* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5762@end ifset
5763@ifset ARM
5764* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5765@end ifset
5766@ifset HPPA
5767* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5768@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5769@ifset M68K
5770* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5771@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5772@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5773* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5774@end ifset
2469cfa2 5775@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5776* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5777@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5778@ifset M68HC11
5779* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5780@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5781@ifset POWERPC
5782* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5783@end ifset
5784@ifset POWERPC64
5785* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5786@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5787@ifset SPU
5788* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5789@end ifset
74459f0e 5790@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5791* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5792@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5793@ifset WIN32
5794* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5795@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5796@ifset XTENSA
5797* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5798@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5799@end menu
5800@end ifset
5801
252b5132
RH
5802@ifset H8300
5803@ifclear GENERIC
5804@raisesections
5805@end ifclear
5806
5807@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5808@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5809
5810@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5811For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5812you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5813
5814@table @emph
5815@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5816@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5817@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5818targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5819program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5820respectively.
5821
5822@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5823@item synthesizing instructions
5824@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5825@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5826sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5827page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5828(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5829@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5830top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5831
5832@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5833@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5834biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5835which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5836page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5837(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5838@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5839the top page of memory).
5840
5841@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5842@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
584332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5844changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5845(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5846@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5847the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5848@end table
5849
5850@ifclear GENERIC
5851@lowersections
5852@end ifclear
5853@end ifset
5854
36f63dca 5855@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5856@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5857@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5858@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5859@node Renesas
5860@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5861
c2dcd04e
NC
5862@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5863H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5864options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5865@end ifset
5866@end ifclear
5867
5868@ifset I960
5869@ifclear GENERIC
5870@raisesections
5871@end ifclear
5872
5873@node i960
5874@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5875
5876@cindex i960 support
5877
5878You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5879specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5880family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5881incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5882linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5883libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5884search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5885
5886For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5887well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5888paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5889the names
5890
5891@smallexample
5892@group
5893try
5894libtry.a
5895tryca
5896libtryca.a
5897@end group
5898@end smallexample
5899
5900@noindent
5901The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5902two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5903
5904You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5905the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5906use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5907specifies a library.
5908
5909@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5910@cindex relaxing on i960
5911@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5912you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5913@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5914them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5915instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5916instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5917target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5918not itself call any subroutines).
5919
48229727
JB
5920@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5921@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5922@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5923The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5924
5925The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5926
36f63dca
NC
5927@ifclear GENERIC
5928@lowersections
5929@end ifclear
5930@end ifset
5931
5932@ifset ARM
5933@ifclear GENERIC
5934@raisesections
5935@end ifclear
5936
93fd0973
SC
5937@ifset M68HC11
5938@ifclear GENERIC
5939@raisesections
5940@end ifclear
5941
5942@node M68HC11/68HC12
5943@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5944
5945@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5946
5947@subsection Linker Relaxation
5948
5949For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5950optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5951
5952@table @emph
5953@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5954@item relaxing address modes
5955@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5956targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5957program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5958respectively.
5959
5960@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5961transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5962page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5963
5964@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5965When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5966of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5967addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5968@code{bset} instructions.
5969
5970@end table
5971
5972@subsection Trampoline Generation
5973
5974@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5975@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5976For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5977call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5978will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5979trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5980case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5981point to the function trampoline.
5982
5983@ifclear GENERIC
5984@lowersections
5985@end ifclear
5986@end ifset
5987
36f63dca 5988@node ARM
3674e28a 5989@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5990
5991@cindex ARM interworking support
5992@kindex --support-old-code
5993For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5994between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5995been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5996line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5997libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5998option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5999given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6000which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6001the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6002non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6003
6004@cindex thumb entry point
6005@cindex entry point, thumb
6006@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6007The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6008@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6009But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6010branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6011executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6012
ce11ba6c
KT
6013@cindex PE import table prefixing
6014@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6015The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6016the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6017elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6018import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6019
e489d0ae
PB
6020@cindex BE8
6021@kindex --be8
6022The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6023executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6024The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6025
3674e28a
PB
6026@cindex TARGET1
6027@kindex --target1-rel
6028@kindex --target1-abs
6029The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6030@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6031or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6032and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6033
6034@cindex TARGET2
6035@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6036The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6037@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6038meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6039@table @samp
6040@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6041@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6042@item abs
6043@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6044@item got-rel
6045@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6046@end table
6047
319850b4
JB
6048@cindex FIX_V4BX
6049@kindex --fix-v4bx
6050The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6051specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6052interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6053also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6054
6055In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6056linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6057@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6058
6059In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6060relocations are ignored.
6061
845b51d6
PB
6062@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6063@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6064Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6065relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6066
6067@smallexample
6068TST rM, #1
6069MOVEQ PC, rM
6070BX Rn
6071@end smallexample
6072
6073This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6074and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6075condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6076
33bfe774
JB
6077@cindex USE_BLX
6078@kindex --use-blx
6079The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6080BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6081situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6082code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6083each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6084
6085This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6086specify it if you are using that target.
6087
c6dd86c6
JB
6088@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6089@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6090The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6091bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6092instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6093to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6094the support code can read the intended values.
6095
6096The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6097intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6098and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6099intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6100full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6101you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6102
6103If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6104enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6105@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6106mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6107vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6108@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6109
6110If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6111potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6112such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6113first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6114instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6115the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6116are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6117
bf21ed78
MS
6118@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6119@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6120The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6121warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6122enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6123linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6124using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6125not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6126
6127@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6128@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6129The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6130warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6131@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6132linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6133using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6134
726150b7
NC
6135@cindex PIC_VENEER
6136@kindex --pic-veneer
6137The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6138ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6139is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6140@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6141
6142@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6143@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6144The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6145code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6146perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6147placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6148controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6149The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6150duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6151group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6152code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6153where they should be placed.
6154
6155The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6156@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6157placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6158branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6159placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6160value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6161exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6162A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6163linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6164from the input sections.
6165
6166The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6167@samp{N = +1}.
6168
1a51c1a4
NC
6169Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6170only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6171otherwise.
6172
36f63dca
NC
6173@ifclear GENERIC
6174@lowersections
6175@end ifclear
6176@end ifset
6177
6178@ifset HPPA
6179@ifclear GENERIC
6180@raisesections
6181@end ifclear
6182
6183@node HPPA ELF32
6184@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6185@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6186@kindex --multi-subspace
6187When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6188import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6189The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6190stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6191multiple sub-spaces.
6192
6193@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6194@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6195Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6196stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6197@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6198sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6199a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6200the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6201conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6202prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6203A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6204branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6205@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6206@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6207detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6208positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6209
6210Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6211single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6212create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6213large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6214
6215@ifclear GENERIC
6216@lowersections
6217@end ifclear
6218@end ifset
6219
7fb9f789
NC
6220@ifset M68K
6221@ifclear GENERIC
6222@raisesections
6223@end ifclear
6224
6225@node M68K
6226@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6227
6228@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6229@kindex --got=@var{type}
6230The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6231The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6232@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6233the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6234@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6235entries only at non-negative offsets.
6236@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6237entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6238support such GOTs.
6239@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6240output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6241file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6242files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6243
6244@ifclear GENERIC
6245@lowersections
6246@end ifclear
6247@end ifset
6248
36f63dca
NC
6249@ifset MMIX
6250@ifclear GENERIC
6251@raisesections
6252@end ifclear
6253
6254@node MMIX
6255@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6256For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6257@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6258understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6259can translate between the two formats.
6260
6261There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6262Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6263registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6264equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6265@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6266global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6267this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6268symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6269
7a2de473
HPN
6270Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6271@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6272The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6273of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6274
6275Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6276are left out from an mmo file.
6277
6278@ifclear GENERIC
6279@lowersections
6280@end ifclear
6281@end ifset
6282
6283@ifset MSP430
6284@ifclear GENERIC
6285@raisesections
6286@end ifclear
6287
6288@node MSP430
6289@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6290For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6291will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6292just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6293
6294@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6295The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6296
6297@table @code
6298@item @samp{.vectors}
6299Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6300
6301@item @samp{.bootloader}
6302Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6303in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6304
6305@item @samp{.infomem}
6306Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6307this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6308
c0065db7 6309@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6310This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6311in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6312
6313@item @samp{.noinit}
6314Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6315
c0065db7 6316The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6317@end table
6318
6319@ifclear GENERIC
6320@lowersections
6321@end ifclear
6322@end ifset
6323
2a60a7a8
AM
6324@ifset POWERPC
6325@ifclear GENERIC
6326@raisesections
6327@end ifclear
6328
6329@node PowerPC ELF32
6330@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6331@cindex PowerPC long branches
6332@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6333Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6334displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6335@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6336@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6337the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6338section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6339section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6340@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6341both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6342considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6343
6344@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6345@table @option
6346@cindex PowerPC PLT
6347@kindex --bss-plt
6348@item --bss-plt
6349Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6350generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6351the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6352writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6353@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6354PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6355compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6356BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6357
016687f8
AM
6358@kindex --secure-plt
6359@item --secure-plt
6360@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6361@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6362when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6363layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6364style BSS PLT.
6365
2a60a7a8
AM
6366@cindex PowerPC GOT
6367@kindex --sdata-got
6368@item --sdata-got
6369The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6370sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6371@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6372section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6373@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6374@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6375@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6376@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6377PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6378pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6379GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6380really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6381
6382@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6383@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6384@item --emit-stub-syms
6385This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6386symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6387
6388@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6389@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6390@item --no-tls-optimize
6391PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6392sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6393disable the optimization.
6394@end table
6395
6396@ifclear GENERIC
6397@lowersections
6398@end ifclear
6399@end ifset
6400
6401@ifset POWERPC64
6402@ifclear GENERIC
6403@raisesections
6404@end ifclear
6405
6406@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6407@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6408
6409@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6410@table @option
6411@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6412@kindex --stub-group-size
6413@item --stub-group-size
6414Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6415by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6416@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6417sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6418a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6419the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6420conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6421prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6422A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6423branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6424@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6425@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6426detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6427positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6428
6429Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6430single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6431create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6432large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6433
6434@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6435@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6436@item --emit-stub-syms
6437This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6438symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6439
6440@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6441@kindex --dotsyms
6442@kindex --no-dotsyms
6443@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6444These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6445in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6446function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6447code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6448properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6449to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6450@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6451dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6452feature.
6453
6454@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6455@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6456@item --no-tls-optimize
6457PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6458sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6459disable the optimization.
6460
6461@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6462@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6463@item --no-opd-optimize
6464PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6465corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6466the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6467Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6468
6469@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6470@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6471@item --non-overlapping-opd
6472Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6473@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6474the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6475entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6476
6477@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6478@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6479@item --no-toc-optimize
6480PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6481entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6482reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6483marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6484marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6485relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6486unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6487reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6488discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6489reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6490code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6491optimization.
6492
6493@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6494@kindex --no-multi-toc
6495@item --no-multi-toc
6496By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6497entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6498total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6499grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6500TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6501calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6502help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
650364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6504Use this option to turn off this feature.
6505@end table
6506
6507@ifclear GENERIC
6508@lowersections
6509@end ifclear
6510@end ifset
6511
49fa1e15
AM
6512@ifset SPU
6513@ifclear GENERIC
6514@raisesections
6515@end ifclear
6516
6517@node SPU ELF
6518@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6519
6520@cindex SPU ELF options
6521@table @option
6522
6523@cindex SPU plugins
6524@kindex --plugin
6525@item --plugin
6526This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6527
6528@cindex SPU overlays
6529@kindex --no-overlays
6530@item --no-overlays
6531Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6532regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6533@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6534turns off all this special overlay handling.
6535
6536@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6537@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6538@item --emit-stub-syms
6539This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6540symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6541
6542@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6543@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6544@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6545This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6546function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6547on calls to non-overlay regions.
6548
6549@cindex SPU local store size
6550@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6551@item --local-store=lo:hi
6552@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6553the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6554range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6555
c0065db7 6556@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6557@kindex --stack-analysis
6558@item --stack-analysis
6559SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6560unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6561under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6562@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6563@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6564determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6565for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6566for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6567for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6568find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6569and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6570under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6571dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6572is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6573and calls will be given.
6574
c0065db7 6575@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6576@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6577@item --emit-stack-syms
6578This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6579in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6580These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6581functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6582functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6583such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6584The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6585@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6586@end table
6587
6588@ifclear GENERIC
6589@lowersections
6590@end ifclear
6591@end ifset
6592
36f63dca
NC
6593@ifset TICOFF
6594@ifclear GENERIC
6595@raisesections
6596@end ifclear
6597
6598@node TI COFF
6599@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6600@cindex TI COFF versions
6601@kindex --format=@var{version}
6602The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6603TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6604also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6605format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6606header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6607
6608@ifclear GENERIC
6609@lowersections
6610@end ifclear
6611@end ifset
6612
2ca22b03
NC
6613@ifset WIN32
6614@ifclear GENERIC
6615@raisesections
6616@end ifclear
6617
6618@node WIN32
6619@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6620
c0065db7 6621This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6622See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6623command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6624
6625@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6626@cindex import libraries
6627@item import libraries
69da35b5 6628The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6629libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6630regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6631archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6632support for creating such libraries provided with the
6633@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6634
c0065db7
RM
6635@item exporting DLL symbols
6636@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6637The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6638
6639@table @emph
6640@item using auto-export functionality
6641@cindex using auto-export functionality
6642By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6643which is controlled by the following command line options:
6644
0a5d968e
NC
6645@itemize
6646@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6647@item --exclude-symbols
6648@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6649@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6650@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6651@end itemize
6652
09e2aba4
DK
6653When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6654(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6655symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6656often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6657private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6658options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6659exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6660final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6661
6662If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6663command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6664if either of the following are true:
6665
6666@itemize
6667@item A DEF file is used.
6668@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6669@end itemize
dc8465bf 6670
c0065db7
RM
6671@item using a DEF file
6672@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6673Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6674an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6675exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6676name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6677command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6678
6679@example
6680gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6681@end example
6682
0a5d968e
NC
6683Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6684@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6685
dc8465bf
NC
6686Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6687
6688@example
4b5bd4e7 6689LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6690
6691EXPORTS
6692foo
6693bar
6694_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6695another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6696var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6697doo = foo == foo2
6698eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6699@end example
dc8465bf 6700
7fcab871 6701This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6702symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6703alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6704by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6705@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6706@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6707export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6708in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6709symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6710
6b31ad16
DS
6711The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6712name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6713the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6714
b45619c0
NC
6715When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6716library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6717@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6718executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6719
6720With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6721specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6722non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6723
6724If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6725or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6726filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6727
4b5bd4e7
DS
6728The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6729
6730@example
6731EXPORTS
6732 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6733 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6734 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6735@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6736
6737Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6738@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6739@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6740@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6741Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6742@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6743string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6744
6745The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6746
6747@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6748will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6749by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6750linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6751library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6752
6753@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6754The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6755the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6756@code{*_imp__foo}).
6757
6758@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6759well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6760read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6761variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6762the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6763extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6764application will behave unexpectedly.
6765
6766@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6767it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6768symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6769API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6770the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6771
4b5bd4e7
DS
6772See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6773other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6774
6775@cindex creating a DEF file
6776While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6777with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6778
6779@item Using decorations
6780@cindex Using decorations
6781Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6782itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6783declared as:
6784
6785@example
6786__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6787__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6788@end example
6789
6790All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6791any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6792this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6793the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6794
6795Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6796decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6797instead:
6798
6799@example
6800__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6801__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6802@end example
6803
c0065db7
RM
6804This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6805when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6806variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6807code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6808of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6809omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6810@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6811information.
c0065db7 6812@end table
dc8465bf 6813
2ca22b03
NC
6814@cindex automatic data imports
6815@item automatic data imports
6816The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6817by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6818compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6819issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6820code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6821c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6822initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6823decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6824platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6825command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6826The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6827suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6828trigger the feature's use.
6829
c0065db7 6830auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6831additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6832
c0065db7 6833"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6834documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6835
c0065db7
RM
6836The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6837occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6838One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6839below.
6840
6841@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6842For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6843object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6844offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6845field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6846in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6847without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6848The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6849references.
6850
c0065db7
RM
6851The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6852be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6853themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6854runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6855compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6856support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6857run without error on an older system.
6858
c0065db7
RM
6859@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6860enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6861
6862@cindex direct linking to a dll
6863@item direct linking to a dll
6864The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6865including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6866libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6867traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6868libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6869function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6870though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6871storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6872tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6873large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6874
c0065db7 6875Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6876@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6877of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6878perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6879select the dll instead of an import library.
6880
2ca22b03 6881
69da35b5
NC
6882For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6883to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6884
6885@example
45e948fe
NC
6886libxxx.dll.a
6887xxx.dll.a
6888libxxx.a
6889xxx.lib
69da35b5 6890cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6891libxxx.dll
6892xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6893@end example
6894
69da35b5
NC
6895before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6896
c0065db7
RM
6897(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6898where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6899@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6900file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6901@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6902
c0065db7
RM
6903Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6904@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6905was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6906various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6907could coexist on the same machine.
6908
2ca22b03
NC
6909The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6910applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6911libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6912
6913@example
6914bin/
6915 cygxxx.dll
6916lib/
6917 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6918 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6919@end example
6920
c0065db7
RM
6921Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6922done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6923
69241. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6925@example
6926gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6927@end example
2ca22b03 6928
69da35b5
NC
6929However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6930(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6931@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6932not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6933
2ca22b03
NC
69342. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6935directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6936should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6937making the app/dll.
6938
6939@example
6940ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6941@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6942
6943Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6944
6945@example
6946gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6947@end example
69da35b5
NC
6948
6949This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6950perfectly legal
6951
6952@example
6953bin/
6954 cygxxx-5.dll
6955lib/
c0065db7 6956 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6957@end example
6958
dc8465bf 6959Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6960even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6961@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6962
6963Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6964wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6965
69661. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6967work with auto-imported data.
6968
dc8465bf
NC
69692. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6970import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6971symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6972for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6973possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6974
45e948fe
NC
69753. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6976critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6977in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6978stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6979
69da35b5 6980So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6981true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6982a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6983binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6984massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6985requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6986will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6987
c0065db7 6988@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6989@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6990@item adding additional names
6991Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6992A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6993exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6994when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6995import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6996
c0065db7 6997@example
dc8465bf
NC
6998LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6999
7000EXPORTS
c0065db7 7001foo
dc8465bf 7002_foo = foo
c0065db7 7003@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7004
7005The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7006
7007Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7008source code using the "weak" attribute:
7009
c0065db7
RM
7010@example
7011void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7012void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7013@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7014
7015See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7016symbols.
7017
7018@item renaming symbols
7019Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7020kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7021@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7022DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7023created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7024
c0065db7 7025@example
dc8465bf
NC
7026LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7027
7028EXPORTS
7029_foo = foo
c0065db7 7030@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7031
7032The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7033@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7034@end table
dc8465bf 7035
0a5d968e 7036Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7037unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7038If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7039@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7040that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7041@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7042renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7043to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7044the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7045In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7046which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7047
7048@cindex weak externals
7049@item weak externals
7050The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7051weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7052defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7053are three variants of weak externals:
7054@itemize
7055@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7056called lazy externals.
7057@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7058This form is not presently implemented.
7059@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7060implemented.
7061@end itemize
7062As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7063are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7064uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7065
7066@cindex aligned common symbols
7067@item aligned common symbols
7068As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7069desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7070the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7071carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7072by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7073tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7074but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7075warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7076@end table
7077
7078@ifclear GENERIC
7079@lowersections
7080@end ifclear
7081@end ifset
7082
e0001a05
NC
7083@ifset XTENSA
7084@ifclear GENERIC
7085@raisesections
7086@end ifclear
7087
7088@node Xtensa
7089@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7090
7091@cindex Xtensa processors
7092The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7093@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7094specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7095keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7096example, with the command:
7097
7098@smallexample
7099SECTIONS
7100@{
7101 .text : @{
7102 *(.literal .text)
7103 @}
7104@}
7105@end smallexample
7106
7107@noindent
7108@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7109and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7110literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7111interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7112group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7113files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7114and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7115
43cd72b9 7116@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7117@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7118Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7119provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7120is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7121literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7122will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7123location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7124the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7125unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7126@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7127range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7128
7129For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7130to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7131instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7132instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7133instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7134@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7135hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7136By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7137switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7138density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7139instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7140performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7141linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7142a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7143
7144The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7145control the linker:
7146
7147@cindex Xtensa options
7148@table @option
e0001a05 7149@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7150@item --no-relax
7151Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7152by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7153relaxation.
7154
7155@item --size-opt
7156When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7157more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7158no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7159alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7160preserve the correctness of the code.
7161@end table
e0001a05
NC
7162
7163@ifclear GENERIC
7164@lowersections
7165@end ifclear
7166@end ifset
7167
252b5132
RH
7168@ifclear SingleFormat
7169@node BFD
7170@chapter BFD
7171
7172@cindex back end
7173@cindex object file management
7174@cindex object formats available
7175@kindex objdump -i
7176The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7177These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7178object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7179format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7180it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7181associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7182object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7183(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7184list all the formats available for your configuration.
7185
7186@cindex BFD requirements
7187@cindex requirements for BFD
7188As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7189several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7190BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7191formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7192been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7193BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7194may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7195
7196One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7197mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7198useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7199conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7200
7201@menu
7202* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7203@end menu
7204
7205@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7206@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7207@cindex opening object files
7208@include bfdsumm.texi
7209@end ifclear
7210
7211@node Reporting Bugs
7212@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7213@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7214@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7215
ff5dcc92 7216Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7217
7218Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7219it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7220to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7221work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7222@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7223
7224In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7225information that enables us to fix the bug.
7226
7227@menu
7228* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7229* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7230@end menu
7231
7232@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7233@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7234@cindex bug criteria
7235
7236If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7237
7238@itemize @bullet
7239@cindex fatal signal
7240@cindex linker crash
7241@cindex crash of linker
7242@item
7243If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7244@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7245
7246@cindex error on valid input
7247@item
ff5dcc92 7248If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7249
7250@cindex invalid input
7251@item
ff5dcc92 7252If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7253may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7254object files are correct.
7255
7256@item
7257If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7258improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7259@end itemize
7260
7261@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7262@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7263@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7264@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7265
7266A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7267products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7268recommend you contact that organization first.
7269
7270You can find contact information for many support companies and
7271individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7272distribution.
7273
ad22bfe8 7274@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7275Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7276@value{BUGURL}.
7277@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7278
7279The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7280@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7281fact or leave it out, state it!
7282
7283Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7284problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7285assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7286matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7287the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7288location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7289were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7290into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7291specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7292and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7293
7294Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7295the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7296on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7297
7298Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7299bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7300respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7301You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7302
7303To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7304
7305@itemize @bullet
7306@item
ff5dcc92 7307The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7308the @samp{--version} argument.
7309
7310Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7311the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7312
7313@item
ff5dcc92 7314Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7315patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7316
7317@item
7318The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7319version number.
7320
7321@item
ff5dcc92 7322What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7323``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7324
7325@item
7326The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7327observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7328list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7329sufficient.
7330
7331If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7332and then we might not encounter the bug.
7333
7334@item
7335A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7336bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7337provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7338bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7339state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7340requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7341we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7342attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7343
7344If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7345@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7346object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7347@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7348how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7349
7350@item
7351A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7352incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7353
ff5dcc92 7354Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7355will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7356not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7357a chance to make a mistake.
7358
7359Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7360say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7361copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7362C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7363and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7364fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7365you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7366any conclusion from our observations.
7367
7368@item
ff5dcc92 7369If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7370diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7371@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7372If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7373context, not by line number.
7374
7375The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7376sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7377@end itemize
7378
7379Here are some things that are not necessary:
7380
7381@itemize @bullet
7382@item
7383A description of the envelope of the bug.
7384
7385Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7386which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7387changes will not affect it.
7388
7389This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7390will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7391with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7392We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7393
7394Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7395of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7396output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7397less time, and so on.
7398
7399However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7400report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7401
7402@item
7403A patch for the bug.
7404
7405A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7406the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7407a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7408to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7409
ff5dcc92 7410Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7411construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7412through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7413able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7414fixed.
7415
7416And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7417patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7418help us to understand.
7419
7420@item
7421A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7422
7423Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7424things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7425@end itemize
7426
7427@node MRI
7428@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7429@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7430To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7431linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7432alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7433described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7434simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7435@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7436linker commands; these commands are described here.
7437
7438In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7439file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7440features to make use of them.
7441
7442You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7443@samp{-c} command-line option.
7444
7445Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7446command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7447blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7448MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7449issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7450
7451Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7452
7453You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7454lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7455The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7456
7457@table @code
7458@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7459@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7460@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7461Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7462the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7463@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7464your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7465script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7466commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7467input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7468@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7469
7470@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7471@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7472Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7473in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7474
7475@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7476
7477@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7478@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7479Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7480@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7481
7482@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7483@item BASE @var{expression}
7484Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7485absolute addresses) in the output file.
7486
7487@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7488@item CHIP @var{expression}
7489@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7490This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7491
7492@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7493@item END
7494This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7495
7496@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7497@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7498Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7499language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7500
7501@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7502@item
252b5132
RH
7503S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7504
7505@item
7506IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7507
7508@item
7509COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7510@samp{COFF}
7511@end enumerate
7512
7513@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7514@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7515Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7516@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7517
7518The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7519same line, with no change in its effect.
7520
7521@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7522@item LOAD @var{filename}
7523@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7524Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7525same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7526command line.
7527
7528@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7529@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7530@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7531MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7532option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7533
7534@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7535@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7536@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7537Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7538order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7539script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7540sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7541file, in the order specified.
7542
7543@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7544@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7545@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7546@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7547Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7548@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7549
7550@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7551@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7552@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7553@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7554You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7555specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7556If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7557@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7558@end table
7559
793c5807
NC
7560@node GNU Free Documentation License
7561@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7562@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7563
370b66a1
CD
7564@node LD Index
7565@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7566
7567@printindex cp
7568
7569@tex
7570% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7571% meantime:
7572\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7573\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7574\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7575\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7576\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7577\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7578\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7579\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7580\page\colophon
7581% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7582@end tex
7583
252b5132 7584@bye
This page took 1.350185 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.